
Commerce & Storefronts
Shopify services
Livin Services is a Shopify and Shopify Plus development team covering theme builds, checkout extensibility, Shopify Functions, Hydrogen storefronts, custom apps, migrations, B2B and POS. We work inside Shopify's modern extension model rather than hacking around it, so upgrades do not break what we built.
+92 337 0330012 · contact@livinservices.com — no discovery fee, no sales call. A written scope and a fixed price, or an honest no.
Full list
All 26 Shopify services
Every one is a real page with its own scope, timeline, tools and deliverables — not a keyword in a list. Each also says plainly when it is the wrong thing to buy.
- Shopify Theme DevelopmentPopularBuild a bespoke theme from the ground up with no bloat carried over
- Shopify Theme CustomizationPopularReshape an existing theme to fit your brand and buying journey
- Shopify Store SetupLaunch a complete store with products, payments, tax and shipping live
- Shopify Store MigrationPopularMove a full catalogue and its search rankings onto Shopify safely
- Shopify Plus DevelopmentUse Plus features properly instead of paying for them and not using them
- Shopify POS SetupMake in-store and online inventory agree in real time, every day
- Shopify Markets SetupSell in multiple countries with correct pricing, tax and local payments
- Shopify B2BPopularGive trade accounts their own pricing, catalogues and payment terms
- Shopify Checkout ExtensibilityPopularCustomise checkout in the supported model so updates never break it
- Shopify Functions DevelopmentMove discount, shipping and payment logic into native platform code
- Shopify Flow AutomationAutomate tagging, fraud checks and fulfilment routing without a developer
- Shopify Hydrogen DevelopmentPopularBuild a React storefront on Shopify data with full front-end control
- Shopify Oxygen DeploymentHost and ship your Hydrogen storefront on Shopify global edge infrastructure
- Shopify Custom AppsPopularBuild store-specific functionality you own outright with no monthly fee
- Shopify Private AppsConnect internal systems to Shopify securely without exposing anything publicly
- Shopify Public App DevelopmentShip a Built for Shopify compliant app through the App Store review
- Shopify CROPopularLift conversion with tested changes rather than opinions about button colour
- Shopify Speed OptimizationPopularCut load time by removing app bloat before touching a line of Liquid
- Shopify SEOPopularFix Shopify structural SEO limits and win category-level search traffic
- Shopify MaintenanceKeep theme, apps and integrations healthy without surprise breakages
- Shopify Product UploadGet thousands of clean, well-structured products live and searchable
- Shopify Store ManagementHand day-to-day merchandising and operations to a team that knows Shopify
- Shopify ERP IntegrationSync stock, pricing and orders with NetSuite, SAP or Business Central
- Shopify CRM IntegrationPush order and customer data into HubSpot, Salesforce or Klaviyo cleanly
- Shopify WholesaleOpen a trade channel without running a second store or second catalogue
- Shopify Subscription SetupLaunch recurring orders with a portal customers can manage themselves
Before you ask us
Work out the shape of a shopify project yourself
Three questions, no email address, no call. You get the scope written out — what is included, what is not, and what we would need from you — which you are free to take to another agency and compare. It is genuinely useful on its own, which is the only reason anyone finishes one of these.
- What you are building, and on which platform
- How much already exists, and what has to be migrated
- Which parts you want us to own and which stay with you
What you get at the end is a written scope, not a price plucked from a range. We do not publish project prices because a price without a scope is a guess — and a guess published as a price is one that gets revised upwards later.
Build your scopeHow we quote, in fullIn detail
Shopify: what the work actually involves
Shopify has changed more in the last three years than the five before it. Checkout extensibility replaced checkout.liquid, Functions replaced scripts, and Hydrogen made custom storefronts realistic. Most stores are still running patterns from the old model. We build on the current one.
What you get from shopify work
- A theme that scores well on Core Web Vitals with real product data loaded
- Checkout customisation that survives Shopify platform updates
- Apps and integrations you own rather than rent
- A store your merchandising team can run without developer tickets
Signs this is what you need
If none of these sound like you, this probably is not the work to buy — and we will say so.
- Your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove
- You are paying for apps that each add a script to every page
- Checkout changes broke when Shopify deprecated checkout.liquid
- Merchandising changes require a developer every single time
What we deliver, every time
- Store and theme audit before any Shopify Theme Development work starts
- Implementation built with Shopify CLI and version control
- Staging theme or preview store for sign-off
- Performance and accessibility pass on every template touched
- Merchant training on anything your team will manage
- Written handover with rollback instructions
- Section and block library your merchandisers can rearrange without a developer
- Theme settings schema documented so future edits stay inside the design system
- Git repository with branch-per-feature deploys, handed over in your organisation
Tools and platforms we work in
+92 337 0330012 · contact@livinservices.com
Choose
Which one do you need?
Most people arrive here knowing what is wrong but not what the work is called, which is completely normal. Find the row that sounds like your situation. If none of them do, message us and we will tell you which shopify service fits — including when the honest answer is that none of them do.
| If this is your situation | Start here |
|---|---|
| New store, no design yet | Shopify Store Setup |
| Existing theme, needs to look and convert better | Shopify Theme Customization |
| Fully bespoke front end | Shopify Theme Development |
| Moving from WooCommerce, Magento or BigCommerce | Shopify Store Migration |
| Custom checkout logic and discounts | Shopify Checkout Extensibility |
| Selling wholesale to trade accounts | Shopify B2B |
| Multi-country, multi-currency selling | Shopify Markets |
| Custom front end on Shopify data | Shopify Hydrogen Development |
How it runs
How shopify work actually runs
- 01
Store review
We look at your theme, apps, checkout and Core Web Vitals before quoting, so the scope reflects the store you actually have.
- 02
Scope and sequence
Work is ordered by revenue impact, not by what is easiest to build — the change that moves conversion first goes first.
- 03
Build on a duplicate theme
Nothing touches your live theme until you have clicked through it yourself on a preview link.
- 04
Publish and monitor
We publish, watch conversion and speed for a week, and fix anything the change surfaced.
Theme work stays in Liquid and native Shopify features wherever possible. Every app we add is a dependency you pay for monthly and we have to justify it.
Straight answer
When not to hire us for this
We would rather lose the enquiry here than three weeks in.
- You want an app installed for every problem. Most Shopify slowness is app bloat, and we will usually recommend removing rather than adding.
- You need checkout customisation on a plan below Plus — Shopify restricts it, and no agency can work around that honestly.
- You are looking for someone to manage your store day to day. We build and hand over.
Example builds
What shopify looks like in practice
Representative engagements across different sectors — the brief, the written scope, the stack and what shipped. These are example builds rather than named client stories; our attributable proof is the verified Google reviews.



How shopify work runs with us
The same four steps every time, whether the engagement is one week or six months. Typical delivery is 2–8 weeks.
Step 1 · Day 0
Conversation
Twenty minutes on the actual problem. No deck, no discovery fee. You leave knowing whether we are the right team.
Step 2 · Within 2 days
Written scope
A document listing every deliverable, the price, the timeline and what is explicitly out of scope. Nothing starts until you approve it.
Step 3 · Delivery window
Build in the open
Work lands in reviewable increments on a staging URL you can open any time. You see progress weekly, not at the end.
Step 4 · Launch
Handover that sticks
Full ownership of code and accounts, a recorded walkthrough and written documentation. No lock-in, no hostage access.
Fixed price, agreed first
The number in the scope is the number you pay.
You own everything
Code, accounts and credentials are yours from day one.
No retainer required
Hire us for one job. Stay only if it was worth it.
Honest no
We turn work down when it will not pay for itself.
Start small if you want to
Three ways to start with shopify
You do not have to pick the exact service first. Tell us the problem and we will point at the one that fits — or tell you it is not worth doing yet.
Ask one question
Send us the thing you are unsure about — whether shopify work is even the right work, or whether what you already have is close enough. You get a straight answer, not a proposal.
Free · usually answered same working day
Get it looked at properly
We review what you have against how shopify work normally runs, and tell you what is actually worth doing.
Findings in writing · no obligation to book the work
Book the shopify work work
One fixed price for the agreed scope, written down before anything starts.
Typically 2–8 weeks · price agreed before work starts
What to send so the first reply is useful
- Your URL, or the platform you are on
- One sentence on what you want shopify work to change
- Any date that matters, and why it matters
- Whether anyone is already working on it
You do not need a brief, a budget or a spec. If shopify work turns out not to be what you need, we will say so and point you at the commerce & storefronts work that is — even where that is less for us to invoice.
Get a fixed price — Shopify work
Theme, app, Plus and checkout engineering. Tell us where you are now and we will recommend the specific service that fits — with a written scope and a fixed price.
- No discovery fee, no deposit to hold a slot, and no retainer attached to a build.
- We usually reply within a couple of hours in working time.
- We write the scope down and attach one fixed price to it, before any work starts.
Questions
1276 shopify questions, answered
Including the ones with awkward answers. If yours is not here, message us — we answer in writing before anyone books a call.
What is Shopify Theme Development?
Shopify Theme Development is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: build a bespoke theme from the ground up with no bloat carried over. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Theme Development?
Shopify Theme Development covers store and theme audit before any shopify theme development work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, section and block library your merchandisers can rearrange without a developer, theme settings schema documented so future edits stay inside the design system and git repository with branch-per-feature deploys, handed over in your organisation. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Theme Development?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Theme Development for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: build a bespoke theme from the ground up with no bloat carried over. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Theme Development?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Theme Development to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Theme Development?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Theme Development as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Theme Development?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Theme Development worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Theme Customization?
Shopify Theme Customization is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: reshape an existing theme to fit your brand and buying journey. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Theme Customization?
Shopify Theme Customization covers store and theme audit before any shopify theme customization work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, work done on a duplicated theme, never on your live one, a written list of what we changed and how to revert each item and existing theme updates kept possible — no core file forks unless you approve one. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Theme Customization?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Theme Customization for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: reshape an existing theme to fit your brand and buying journey. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Theme Customization?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Theme Customization to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Theme Customization?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Theme Customization as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Theme Customization?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Theme Customization worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Store Migration?
Shopify Store Migration is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: move a full catalogue and its search rankings onto Shopify safely. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Store Migration?
Shopify Store Migration covers store and theme audit before any shopify store migration work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, a complete 301 redirect map from every old url, checked before launch and again after, rankings and traffic monitored for 30 days post-launch, with fixes included and a full export of the old store retained until you confirm the new one is right. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Store Migration?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Store Migration for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: move a full catalogue and its search rankings onto Shopify safely. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Store Migration?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Store Migration to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Store Migration?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Store Migration as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Store Migration?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Store Migration worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify B2B?
Shopify B2B is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: give trade accounts their own pricing, catalogues and payment terms. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify B2B?
Shopify B2B covers store and theme audit before any shopify b2b work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, company accounts, locations and buyer permissions modelled to match how your trade customers actually order, price lists and volume rules configured per catalogue and net payment terms and draft-order workflow tested with a real buyer before go-live. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify B2B?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify B2B for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: give trade accounts their own pricing, catalogues and payment terms. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify B2B?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify B2B to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify B2B?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify B2B as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify B2B?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify B2B worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
Shopify Checkout Extensibility is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: customise checkout in the supported model so updates never break it. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
Shopify Checkout Extensibility covers store and theme audit before any shopify checkout extensibility work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, everything built in the supported extension model — no checkout.liquid, which shopify has deprecated, a clear statement upfront of anything your requirement cannot do in the supported model and extensions version-pinned so a platform update cannot silently change behaviour. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Checkout Extensibility for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: customise checkout in the supported model so updates never break it. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Checkout Extensibility to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Checkout Extensibility as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Checkout Extensibility worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Hydrogen Development?
Shopify Hydrogen Development is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: build a React storefront on Shopify data with full front-end control. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Hydrogen Development?
Shopify Hydrogen Development covers store and theme audit before any shopify hydrogen development work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, an honest assessment first of whether headless is worth it — for most stores a good liquid theme wins, server-side rendering configured so the storefront is crawlable, not a blank shell and preview deployments per branch for merchandising sign-off. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Hydrogen Development?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Hydrogen Development for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: build a React storefront on Shopify data with full front-end control. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Hydrogen Development?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Hydrogen Development to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Hydrogen Development?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Hydrogen Development as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Hydrogen Development?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Hydrogen Development worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Custom Apps?
Shopify Custom Apps is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: build store-specific functionality you own outright with no monthly fee. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Custom Apps?
Shopify Custom Apps covers store and theme audit before any shopify custom apps work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, built in polaris so it looks and behaves like the rest of the shopify admin, source code and hosting in your accounts — you own it outright, with no licence back to us and webhook reconciliation so a missed event does not leave your data out of sync. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Custom Apps?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Custom Apps for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: build store-specific functionality you own outright with no monthly fee. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Custom Apps?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Custom Apps to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Custom Apps?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Custom Apps as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Custom Apps?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Custom Apps worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify CRO?
Shopify CRO is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: lift conversion with tested changes rather than opinions about button colour. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify CRO?
Shopify CRO covers store and theme audit before any shopify cro work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, every change measured against a stated hypothesis, with the losing tests reported too, a written note on how long a test needs to run at your traffic before it can mean anything and no guaranteed uplift — we will not promise a conversion number, and nobody honest will. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify CRO?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify CRO for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: lift conversion with tested changes rather than opinions about button colour. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify CRO?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify CRO to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify CRO?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify CRO as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify CRO?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify CRO worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Speed Optimization?
Shopify Speed Optimization is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: cut load time by removing app bloat before touching a line of Liquid. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Speed Optimization?
Shopify Speed Optimization covers store and theme audit before any shopify speed optimization work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, an app-by-app script audit first — most shopify slowness is apps, not theme code, before and after measured on a real mid-range android over 4g, not a desktop score and a list of apps we recommend removing, even where that means less for us to bill. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Speed Optimization?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Speed Optimization for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: cut load time by removing app bloat before touching a line of Liquid. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Speed Optimization?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Speed Optimization to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Speed Optimization?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Speed Optimization as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Speed Optimization?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Speed Optimization worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify SEO?
Shopify SEO is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: fix Shopify structural SEO limits and win category-level search traffic. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify SEO?
Shopify SEO covers store and theme audit before any shopify seo work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, shopify's forced /collections/ and /products/ url structure handled properly, including duplicate collection paths, collection pages given real content rather than a grid and a title and no ranking guarantee — we do not own the ranking system, and neither does anyone quoting you one. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify SEO?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify SEO for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: fix Shopify structural SEO limits and win category-level search traffic. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify SEO?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify SEO to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify SEO?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify SEO as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify SEO?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify SEO worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Store Setup?
Shopify Store Setup is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: launch a complete store with products, payments, tax and shipping live. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Store Setup?
Shopify Store Setup covers store and theme audit before any shopify store setup work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, tax, shipping zones and payment methods configured and test-ordered end to end, every account created in your name, with you as owner from day one and pre-launch checklist signed off together before the password page comes down. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Store Setup?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Store Setup for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: launch a complete store with products, payments, tax and shipping live. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Store Setup?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Store Setup to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Store Setup?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Store Setup as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Store Setup?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Store Setup worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Plus Development?
Shopify Plus Development is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: use Plus features properly instead of paying for them and not using them. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Plus Development?
Shopify Plus Development covers store and theme audit before any shopify plus development work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, an honest read on whether plus is worth its cost for your volume — sometimes it is not, scripts migrated to functions, since scripts are on their way out and organisation-level user roles and store structure documented. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Plus Development?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Plus Development for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: use Plus features properly instead of paying for them and not using them. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Plus Development?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Plus Development to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Plus Development?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Plus Development as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Plus Development?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Plus Development worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify POS Setup?
Shopify POS Setup is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: make in-store and online inventory agree in real time, every day. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify POS Setup?
Shopify POS Setup covers store and theme audit before any shopify pos setup work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, location-level inventory rules configured so online stock never oversells the shop floor, staff pins, permissions and tills set up, with a run-through for your team and hardware pairing tested on the actual devices you will use, not a demo kit. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify POS Setup?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify POS Setup for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: make in-store and online inventory agree in real time, every day. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify POS Setup?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify POS Setup to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify POS Setup?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify POS Setup as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify POS Setup?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify POS Setup worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Markets Setup?
Shopify Markets Setup is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: sell in multiple countries with correct pricing, tax and local payments. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Markets Setup?
Shopify Markets Setup covers store and theme audit before any shopify markets setup work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, per-market pricing, duties and tax behaviour configured and test-ordered, hreflang and market-specific domains set so markets do not compete in search and local payment methods added per market — ideal, bancontact, mada where they matter. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Markets Setup?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Markets Setup for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: sell in multiple countries with correct pricing, tax and local payments. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Markets Setup?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Markets Setup to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Markets Setup?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Markets Setup as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Markets Setup?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Markets Setup worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Functions Development?
Shopify Functions Development is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: move discount, shipping and payment logic into native platform code. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Functions Development?
Shopify Functions Development covers store and theme audit before any shopify functions development work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, unit tests for each discount, shipping or payment rule, so edge cases are provable, existing shopify scripts translated and retired rather than left running alongside and function inputs and limits documented, including what happens at high cart volume. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Functions Development?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Functions Development for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: move discount, shipping and payment logic into native platform code. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Functions Development?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Functions Development to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Functions Development?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Functions Development as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Functions Development?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Functions Development worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Flow Automation?
Shopify Flow Automation is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: automate tagging, fraud checks and fulfilment routing without a developer. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Flow Automation?
Shopify Flow Automation covers store and theme audit before any shopify flow automation work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, each workflow documented in plain language so your team can edit it later, dry-run on historical orders before anything is switched on live and failure alerts routed to a channel someone actually watches. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Flow Automation?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Flow Automation for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: automate tagging, fraud checks and fulfilment routing without a developer. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Flow Automation?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Flow Automation to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Flow Automation?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Flow Automation as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Flow Automation?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Flow Automation worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
Shopify Oxygen Deployment is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: host and ship your Hydrogen storefront on Shopify global edge infrastructure. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
Shopify Oxygen Deployment covers store and theme audit before any shopify oxygen deployment work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, environment variables and secrets configured per environment, never committed, rollback tested before launch, not assumed to work and custom domain, ssl and cache rules verified from more than one region. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Oxygen Deployment for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: host and ship your Hydrogen storefront on Shopify global edge infrastructure. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Oxygen Deployment to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Oxygen Deployment as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Oxygen Deployment worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Private Apps?
Shopify Private Apps is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: connect internal systems to Shopify securely without exposing anything publicly. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Private Apps?
Shopify Private Apps covers store and theme audit before any shopify private apps work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, least-privilege api scopes — the integration gets only what it needs, credential rotation procedure written down and handed to whoever holds it and retry and dead-letter handling so a failed sync is visible rather than silent. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Private Apps?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Private Apps for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: connect internal systems to Shopify securely without exposing anything publicly. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Private Apps?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Private Apps to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Private Apps?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Private Apps as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Private Apps?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Private Apps worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Public App Development?
Shopify Public App Development is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: ship a Built for Shopify compliant app through the App Store review. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Public App Development?
Shopify Public App Development covers store and theme audit before any shopify public app development work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, built for shopify requirements met deliberately, not discovered at review, mandatory gdpr webhooks, billing and uninstall handling implemented and tested and a realistic view of review timelines — shopify sets those, not us. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Public App Development?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Public App Development for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: ship a Built for Shopify compliant app through the App Store review. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Public App Development?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Public App Development to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Public App Development?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Public App Development as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Public App Development?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Public App Development worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Maintenance?
Shopify Maintenance is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: keep theme, apps and integrations healthy without surprise breakages. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Maintenance?
Shopify Maintenance covers store and theme audit before any shopify maintenance work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, theme and app updates applied on a staging copy first, never straight to live, a monthly written note of what changed, what broke and what we watched and no lock-in: month to month, and you keep every account if you stop. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Maintenance?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Maintenance for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: keep theme, apps and integrations healthy without surprise breakages. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Maintenance?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Maintenance to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Maintenance?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Maintenance as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Maintenance?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Maintenance worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Product Upload?
Shopify Product Upload is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: get thousands of clean, well-structured products live and searchable. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Product Upload?
Shopify Product Upload covers store and theme audit before any shopify product upload work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, variants, metafields and options structured for filtering, not just pasted in, image naming and alt text written for search rather than left as img_0421 and a sample batch loaded and approved by you before the full catalogue runs. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Product Upload?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Product Upload for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: get thousands of clean, well-structured products live and searchable. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Product Upload?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Product Upload to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Product Upload?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Product Upload as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Product Upload?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Product Upload worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Store Management?
Shopify Store Management is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: hand day-to-day merchandising and operations to a team that knows Shopify. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Store Management?
Shopify Store Management covers store and theme audit before any shopify store management work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, a named person who knows your store, not a rotating ticket queue, agreed response windows in writing, matched to our real working hours and everything done in your accounts, so nothing walks out of the door if we stop. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Store Management?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Store Management for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: hand day-to-day merchandising and operations to a team that knows Shopify. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Store Management?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Store Management to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Store Management?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Store Management as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Store Management?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Store Management worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify ERP Integration?
Shopify ERP Integration is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: sync stock, pricing and orders with NetSuite, SAP or Business Central. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify ERP Integration?
Shopify ERP Integration covers store and theme audit before any shopify erp integration work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, a field-by-field mapping document agreed before any code is written, conflict rules decided explicitly — which system wins when stock disagrees and reconciliation reporting so a silent sync failure surfaces the same day. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify ERP Integration?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify ERP Integration for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: sync stock, pricing and orders with NetSuite, SAP or Business Central. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify ERP Integration?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify ERP Integration to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify ERP Integration?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify ERP Integration as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify ERP Integration?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify ERP Integration worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify CRM Integration?
Shopify CRM Integration is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: push order and customer data into HubSpot, Salesforce or Klaviyo cleanly. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify CRM Integration?
Shopify CRM Integration covers store and theme audit before any shopify crm integration work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, consent state carried across with the contact, so marketing does not email people who opted out, deduplication rules set so one customer does not become three records and historical backfill run once, then verified against shopify totals. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify CRM Integration?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify CRM Integration for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: push order and customer data into HubSpot, Salesforce or Klaviyo cleanly. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify CRM Integration?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify CRM Integration to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify CRM Integration?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify CRM Integration as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify CRM Integration?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify CRM Integration worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Wholesale?
Shopify Wholesale is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: open a trade channel without running a second store or second catalogue. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Wholesale?
Shopify Wholesale covers store and theme audit before any shopify wholesale work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, trade pricing kept invisible to retail customers, verified by testing as a logged-out visitor, minimum order quantities and case packs enforced at the cart, not in an email afterwards and an honest comparison first: whether shopify b2b or a separate wholesale store suits your volume. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Wholesale?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Wholesale for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: open a trade channel without running a second store or second catalogue. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Wholesale?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Wholesale to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Wholesale?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Wholesale as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Wholesale?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Wholesale worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
What is Shopify Subscription Setup?
Shopify Subscription Setup is a shopify service from Livin Services. In one line: launch recurring orders with a portal customers can manage themselves. It's a defined piece of work with an agreed finish line, not an open-ended retainer, so you know what you're buying before you commit to it.
What is included in Shopify Subscription Setup?
Shopify Subscription Setup covers store and theme audit before any shopify subscription setup work starts, implementation built with shopify cli and version control, staging theme or preview store for sign-off, performance and accessibility pass on every template touched, merchant training on anything your team will manage, written handover with rollback instructions, a self-service portal where customers can skip, swap and cancel without emailing you, dunning and failed-payment retries configured, since that is where subscription revenue actually leaks and cancellation kept genuinely easy — dark patterns lose more lifetime value than they save. All of that gets written down before we start, so you know exactly what's landing and what isn't. Anything outside the list gets quoted separately — we won't quietly absorb it and we won't quietly bill for it either.
What is not included in Shopify Subscription Setup?
Anything not named in the written scope. In practice that usually means ongoing management after handover, content and copy you have not supplied, third-party licence and subscription costs, and work in other disciplines — those are separate services with their own scopes. We list exclusions explicitly rather than leaving them to be discovered halfway through.
Who is Shopify Subscription Setup for?
It fits teams where your theme has been edited by five agencies and nobody knows what is safe to remove. The goal is simple: launch recurring orders with a portal customers can manage themselves. If your situation is different, tell us and we will point you at the shopify service that actually fits — including one we do not sell.
When should I not buy Shopify Subscription Setup?
When the underlying problem sits somewhere else. Buying Shopify Subscription Setup to fix something it does not touch is expensive and disappointing in equal measure. Tell us what outcome you are actually after and we will say plainly whether this is the right service, a different one, or nothing at all right now.
How is this different from hiring a freelancer for Shopify Subscription Setup?
A good freelancer is often the right answer for a narrow, well-defined task, and cheaper. What an agency adds is continuity when someone is unavailable, a second pair of eyes on decisions, and accountability that survives the individual. Judge it on whether your project needs those things — plenty do not.
Do you offer Shopify Subscription Setup as an ongoing retainer?
This service is scoped as a defined piece of work with a handover at the end, which is deliberate: it means the engagement has a finish line rather than drifting into an indefinite monthly cost. If you need continuing support afterwards we can arrange it, but it is a separate agreement you enter knowingly.
How many rounds of revisions are included in Shopify Subscription Setup?
Revisions within the agreed scope are part of the work, not a numbered allowance to be rationed. What is charged separately is a change of direction — new requirements, a reversed decision, or work outside what was scoped. The distinction is written into the scope so it is not decided by argument later.
Is Shopify Subscription Setup worth it for a small business?
Sometimes, and sometimes not — it depends on whether the thing it fixes is actually what is holding you back. Smaller scopes are quoted the same way as large ones, with no minimum engagement, so size is not the barrier. Being honest about whether this is your highest-leverage move is more useful to you than a yes.
How long does Shopify Theme Development take?
A typical Shopify Theme Development engagement runs 4–8 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Theme Development be delivered faster than 4–8 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Theme Development quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Theme Development cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Theme Development?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Theme Development isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Theme Development turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Theme Development?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Theme Development?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Theme Development. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Theme Customization take?
A typical Shopify Theme Customization engagement runs 1–3 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Theme Customization be delivered faster than 1–3 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Theme Customization quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Theme Customization cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Theme Customization?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Theme Customization isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Theme Customization turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Theme Customization?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Theme Customization?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Theme Customization. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Store Migration take?
A typical Shopify Store Migration engagement runs 3–6 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Store Migration be delivered faster than 3–6 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Store Migration quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Store Migration cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Store Migration?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Store Migration isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Store Migration turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Store Migration?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Store Migration?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Store Migration. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify B2B take?
A typical Shopify B2B engagement runs 3–7 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify B2B be delivered faster than 3–7 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify B2B quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify B2B cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify B2B?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify B2B isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify B2B turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify B2B?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify B2B?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify B2B. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Checkout Extensibility take?
A typical Shopify Checkout Extensibility engagement runs 2–5 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Checkout Extensibility be delivered faster than 2–5 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Checkout Extensibility quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Checkout Extensibility cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Checkout Extensibility isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Checkout Extensibility turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Checkout Extensibility. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Hydrogen Development take?
A typical Shopify Hydrogen Development engagement runs 6–12 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Hydrogen Development be delivered faster than 6–12 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Hydrogen Development quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Hydrogen Development cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Hydrogen Development?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Hydrogen Development isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Hydrogen Development turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Hydrogen Development?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Hydrogen Development?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Hydrogen Development. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Custom Apps take?
A typical Shopify Custom Apps engagement runs 3–8 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Custom Apps be delivered faster than 3–8 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Custom Apps quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Custom Apps cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Custom Apps?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Custom Apps isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Custom Apps turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Custom Apps?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Custom Apps?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Custom Apps. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify CRO take?
A typical Shopify CRO engagement runs 4–12 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify CRO be delivered faster than 4–12 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify CRO quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify CRO cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify CRO?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify CRO isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify CRO turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify CRO?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify CRO?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify CRO. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Speed Optimization take?
A typical Shopify Speed Optimization engagement runs 1–3 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Speed Optimization be delivered faster than 1–3 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Speed Optimization quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Speed Optimization cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Speed Optimization?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Speed Optimization isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Speed Optimization turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Speed Optimization?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Speed Optimization?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Speed Optimization. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify SEO take?
A typical Shopify SEO engagement runs 3–6 months from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify SEO be delivered faster than 3–6 months?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify SEO quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify SEO cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify SEO?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify SEO isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify SEO turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify SEO?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify SEO?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify SEO. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Store Setup take?
A typical Shopify Store Setup engagement runs 2–4 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Store Setup be delivered faster than 2–4 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Store Setup quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Store Setup cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Store Setup?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Store Setup isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Store Setup turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Store Setup?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Store Setup?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Store Setup. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Plus Development take?
A typical Shopify Plus Development engagement runs 4–12 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Plus Development be delivered faster than 4–12 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Plus Development quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Plus Development cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Plus Development?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Plus Development isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Plus Development turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Plus Development?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Plus Development?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Plus Development. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify POS Setup take?
A typical Shopify POS Setup engagement runs 2–4 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify POS Setup be delivered faster than 2–4 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify POS Setup quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify POS Setup cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify POS Setup?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify POS Setup isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify POS Setup turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify POS Setup?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify POS Setup?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify POS Setup. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Markets Setup take?
A typical Shopify Markets Setup engagement runs 2–5 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Markets Setup be delivered faster than 2–5 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Markets Setup quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Markets Setup cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Markets Setup?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Markets Setup isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Markets Setup turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Markets Setup?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Markets Setup?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Markets Setup. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Functions Development take?
A typical Shopify Functions Development engagement runs 2–4 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Functions Development be delivered faster than 2–4 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Functions Development quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Functions Development cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Functions Development?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Functions Development isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Functions Development turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Functions Development?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Functions Development?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Functions Development. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Flow Automation take?
A typical Shopify Flow Automation engagement runs 1–2 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Flow Automation be delivered faster than 1–2 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Flow Automation quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Flow Automation cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Flow Automation?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Flow Automation isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Flow Automation turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Flow Automation?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Flow Automation?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Flow Automation. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Oxygen Deployment take?
A typical Shopify Oxygen Deployment engagement runs 1–2 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Oxygen Deployment be delivered faster than 1–2 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Oxygen Deployment quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Oxygen Deployment cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Oxygen Deployment isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Oxygen Deployment turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Oxygen Deployment. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Private Apps take?
A typical Shopify Private Apps engagement runs 2–5 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Private Apps be delivered faster than 2–5 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Private Apps quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Private Apps cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Private Apps?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Private Apps isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Private Apps turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Private Apps?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Private Apps?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Private Apps. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Public App Development take?
A typical Shopify Public App Development engagement runs 8–16 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Public App Development be delivered faster than 8–16 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Public App Development quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Public App Development cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Public App Development?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Public App Development isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Public App Development turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Public App Development?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Public App Development?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Public App Development. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Maintenance take?
A typical Shopify Maintenance engagement runs ongoing from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Maintenance be delivered faster than ongoing?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Maintenance quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Maintenance cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Maintenance?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Maintenance isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Maintenance turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Maintenance?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Maintenance?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Maintenance. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Product Upload take?
A typical Shopify Product Upload engagement runs 3 days–2 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Product Upload be delivered faster than 3 days–2 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Product Upload quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Product Upload cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Product Upload?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Product Upload isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Product Upload turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Product Upload?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Product Upload?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Product Upload. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Store Management take?
A typical Shopify Store Management engagement runs ongoing from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Store Management be delivered faster than ongoing?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Store Management quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Store Management cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Store Management?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Store Management isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Store Management turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Store Management?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Store Management?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Store Management. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify ERP Integration take?
A typical Shopify ERP Integration engagement runs 4–10 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify ERP Integration be delivered faster than 4–10 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify ERP Integration quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify ERP Integration cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify ERP Integration?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify ERP Integration isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify ERP Integration turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify ERP Integration?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify ERP Integration?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify ERP Integration. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify CRM Integration take?
A typical Shopify CRM Integration engagement runs 2–4 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify CRM Integration be delivered faster than 2–4 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify CRM Integration quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify CRM Integration cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify CRM Integration?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify CRM Integration isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify CRM Integration turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify CRM Integration?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify CRM Integration?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify CRM Integration. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Wholesale take?
A typical Shopify Wholesale engagement runs 3–6 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Wholesale be delivered faster than 3–6 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Wholesale quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Wholesale cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Wholesale?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Wholesale isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Wholesale turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Wholesale?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Wholesale?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Wholesale. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How long does Shopify Subscription Setup take?
A typical Shopify Subscription Setup engagement runs 2–5 weeks from kickoff to handover. That covers discovery and scoping, build or implementation, review with your team, and a final QA pass. Larger or multi-market builds extend this and we say so during scoping rather than after.
Can Shopify Subscription Setup be delivered faster than 2–5 weeks?
Sometimes, if the scope is reduced rather than the care taken. We will tell you which parts can be deferred to a second phase to hit a date. What we will not do is compress testing and review to make a deadline look achievable — that moves the cost from the timeline to the month after launch.
How is Shopify Subscription Setup quoted?
One fixed price against a written scope. Not an hourly rate. What moves that number is how many templates, integrations and awkward edge cases are involved — not how long we happen to take, which is our problem to manage, not yours. There's no price list because a real quote depends on your situation. Tell us what you need and you'll get a written scope and a fixed figure back, with anything that could change it flagged upfront rather than appearing on an invoice later.
What makes Shopify Subscription Setup cost more or less?
Four things, roughly in order of how much they matter. How much is genuinely bespoke versus configuration. How many integrations and outside systems are in play. What state your starting point is in — inherited problems have to be sorted before anything new can sit on top of them. And how many people are in the approval chain. We'll name which of those apply to you in the quote, so you can see where the number came from.
Do I pay anything to get a quote for Shopify Subscription Setup?
No. Scoping and quoting are free, and so is the conversation to get there. If it turns out Shopify Subscription Setup isn't what you need, you'll hear that for free too — rather than being sold a paid discovery phase that arrives at the same answer three weeks later.
What happens if Shopify Subscription Setup turns out to be bigger than quoted?
If we underestimated something inside the agreed scope, we absorb it. That's what a fixed price means. If the scope itself changes because a new requirement turns up, we quote that separately and you decide whether to go ahead before anyone touches it. You won't get an invoice for something you didn't approve.
What are the payment terms for Shopify Subscription Setup?
Agreed in writing before work starts, as part of the scope. There is no deposit taken to hold a slot in the calendar and no charge for the scoping conversation. If the engagement is stopped partway by either side, you pay for the work completed to that point and you keep it.
How long until we see the effect of Shopify Subscription Setup?
Depends entirely on what it is. Build work shows immediately because the thing either exists or it does not. Anything depending on user behaviour, search engines or list warm-up takes longer, and how much longer is a function of your traffic volume — low traffic means a longer wait before any change is distinguishable from noise. We say which category your work falls into up front.
We had a cheaper quote for Shopify Subscription Setup. Why?
Usually one of three reasons: a narrower scope than ours, a junior person delivering it, or exclusions that surface as change requests later. Ask both suppliers for the written scope and compare those rather than the totals. If theirs genuinely covers the same ground for less, take it — and we will tell you so.
How do I brief a Shopify Theme Development project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Theme Development?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Theme Development outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Theme Development or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Theme Customization project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Theme Customization?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Theme Customization outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Theme Customization or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Store Migration project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Store Migration?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Store Migration outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Store Migration or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify B2B project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify B2B?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify B2B outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify B2B or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Checkout Extensibility project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Checkout Extensibility outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Checkout Extensibility or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Hydrogen Development project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Hydrogen Development?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Hydrogen Development outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Hydrogen Development or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Custom Apps project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Custom Apps?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Custom Apps outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Custom Apps or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify CRO project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify CRO?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify CRO outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify CRO or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Speed Optimization project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Speed Optimization?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Speed Optimization outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Speed Optimization or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify SEO project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify SEO?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify SEO outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify SEO or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Store Setup project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Store Setup?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Store Setup outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Store Setup or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Plus Development project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Plus Development?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Plus Development outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Plus Development or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify POS Setup project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify POS Setup?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify POS Setup outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify POS Setup or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Markets Setup project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Markets Setup?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Markets Setup outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Markets Setup or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Functions Development project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Functions Development?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Functions Development outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Functions Development or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Flow Automation project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Flow Automation?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Flow Automation outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Flow Automation or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Oxygen Deployment project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Oxygen Deployment outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Oxygen Deployment or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Private Apps project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Private Apps?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Private Apps outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Private Apps or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Public App Development project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Public App Development?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Public App Development outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Public App Development or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Maintenance project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Maintenance?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Maintenance outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Maintenance or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Product Upload project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Product Upload?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Product Upload outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Product Upload or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Store Management project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Store Management?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Store Management outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Store Management or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify ERP Integration project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify ERP Integration?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify ERP Integration outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify ERP Integration or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify CRM Integration project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify CRM Integration?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify CRM Integration outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify CRM Integration or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Wholesale project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Wholesale?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Wholesale outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Wholesale or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
How do I brief a Shopify Subscription Setup project?
Say what is happening now, what you want to be different, and by when. That is genuinely enough to get a scope back. You do not need to specify a solution — if you tell us the outcome, we will tell you what it takes, and sometimes that is less than you expected. What slows a brief down is a list of features with no stated problem behind them.
What should I ask before hiring anyone for Shopify Subscription Setup?
Five questions worth asking any supplier. Who will actually do the work, not who is in the meeting. What is explicitly excluded. What happens if it takes longer than quoted. Whose name the accounts are in at the end. And what they would talk you out of — the last one is the hardest to fake, and the most revealing.
What does a good Shopify Subscription Setup outcome look like?
Everything in the written scope delivered and verified, your team able to maintain it without us, and a recorded before-and-after on whatever measure you agreed at the start. Notably not: a slide deck, a vanity score, or a number with no baseline beside it.
How do I know if I need Shopify Subscription Setup or something else?
Describe the symptom rather than the fix. If the symptom is one this service addresses, it is the right service. If it is not, we will name the one that is — including when that is a different discipline entirely, or nothing right now. Guessing at the service before naming the problem is how budgets get spent on the wrong thing.
What are the risks with Shopify Theme Development, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Theme Development break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Theme Development?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Theme Development work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Theme Development project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Theme Customization, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Theme Customization break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Theme Customization?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Theme Customization work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Theme Customization project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Store Migration, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Store Migration break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Store Migration?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Store Migration work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Store Migration project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify B2B, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify B2B break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify B2B?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify B2B work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify B2B project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Checkout Extensibility, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Checkout Extensibility break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Checkout Extensibility work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Checkout Extensibility project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Hydrogen Development, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Hydrogen Development break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Hydrogen Development?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Hydrogen Development work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Hydrogen Development project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Custom Apps, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Custom Apps break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Custom Apps?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Custom Apps work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Custom Apps project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify CRO, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify CRO break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify CRO?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify CRO work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify CRO project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Speed Optimization, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Speed Optimization break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Speed Optimization?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Speed Optimization work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Speed Optimization project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify SEO, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify SEO break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify SEO?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify SEO work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify SEO project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Store Setup, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Store Setup break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Store Setup?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Store Setup work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Store Setup project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Plus Development, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Plus Development break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Plus Development?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Plus Development work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Plus Development project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify POS Setup, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify POS Setup break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify POS Setup?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify POS Setup work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify POS Setup project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Markets Setup, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Markets Setup break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Markets Setup?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Markets Setup work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Markets Setup project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Functions Development, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Functions Development break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Functions Development?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Functions Development work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Functions Development project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Flow Automation, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Flow Automation break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Flow Automation?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Flow Automation work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Flow Automation project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Oxygen Deployment, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Oxygen Deployment break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Oxygen Deployment work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Oxygen Deployment project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Private Apps, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Private Apps break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Private Apps?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Private Apps work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Private Apps project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Public App Development, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Public App Development break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Public App Development?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Public App Development work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Public App Development project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Maintenance, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Maintenance break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Maintenance?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Maintenance work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Maintenance project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Product Upload, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Product Upload break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Product Upload?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Product Upload work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Product Upload project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Store Management, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Store Management break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Store Management?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Store Management work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Store Management project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify ERP Integration, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify ERP Integration break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify ERP Integration?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify ERP Integration work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify ERP Integration project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify CRM Integration, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify CRM Integration break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify CRM Integration?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify CRM Integration work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify CRM Integration project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Wholesale, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Wholesale break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Wholesale?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Wholesale work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Wholesale project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
What are the risks with Shopify Subscription Setup, honestly?
Three real ones. The starting point turning out to be worse than it looked, which extends the work. A dependency outside our control — a platform, a plugin, a third-party API — changing mid-project. And decisions on your side taking longer than planned, which is the most common of the three by a distance. We name whichever apply to you in the scope rather than after.
Will Shopify Subscription Setup break anything that currently works?
That is the thing we test hardest against. Work happens on a copy or in a staging environment wherever the platform allows it, and we check the paths that already work before anything goes live. Where a change genuinely cannot be made without affecting something else, you hear that before it happens, not after.
What happens to our data during Shopify Subscription Setup?
It stays yours and it stays in your systems. We work inside accounts you own, we do not export customer data to our own tools, and access is created so you can revoke it the moment the project ends. If a piece of work genuinely requires handling personal data, we say what, why and for how long, in writing.
Do you sign an NDA for Shopify Subscription Setup work?
Yes, and without making it an event. Send yours over and we will sign it. We do not publish client names or work without permission either way — the example builds on this site are deliberately unnamed for that reason.
Can we stop the Shopify Subscription Setup project partway through?
Yes. You pay for what has been completed and you take everything produced up to that point, including access and any partial documentation. Nothing is held back as leverage. We would rather stop a project that has stopped making sense than bill through to the end of it.
How does the Shopify Theme Development process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Theme Development work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Theme Development?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Theme Development?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Theme Development?
We work with Shopify CLI, Liquid, Online Store 2.0 sections, Tailwind CSS, GitHub and Lighthouse CI for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Shopify CLI setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Theme Development?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Theme Development?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Theme Development work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Theme Development?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Theme Development?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Theme Customization process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Theme Customization work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Theme Customization?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Theme Customization?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Theme Customization?
We work with Liquid, Shopify Theme Editor, Shopify CLI, Git and Figma for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Liquid setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Theme Customization?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Theme Customization?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Theme Customization work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Theme Customization?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Theme Customization?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Store Migration process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Store Migration work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Store Migration?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Store Migration?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Store Migration?
We work with Matrixify, Shopify Admin API, Screaming Frog, Google Search Console and Cloudflare for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Matrixify setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Store Migration?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Store Migration?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Store Migration work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Store Migration?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Store Migration?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify B2B process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify B2B work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify B2B?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify B2B?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify B2B?
We work with Shopify B2B, Company accounts, Catalogs API, Shopify Functions and Net terms for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Shopify B2B setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify B2B?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify B2B?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify B2B work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify B2B?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify B2B?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Checkout Extensibility process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Checkout Extensibility work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
We work with Checkout UI extensions, Shopify Functions, Checkout Editor, Shopify CLI and React for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Checkout UI extensions setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Checkout Extensibility work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Hydrogen Development process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Hydrogen Development work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Hydrogen Development?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Hydrogen Development?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Hydrogen Development?
We work with Hydrogen, Remix, React, Storefront API, TypeScript and Oxygen for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Hydrogen setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Hydrogen Development?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Hydrogen Development?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Hydrogen Development work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Hydrogen Development?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Hydrogen Development?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Custom Apps process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Custom Apps work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Custom Apps?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Custom Apps?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Custom Apps?
We work with Shopify App CLI, Remix, Polaris, GraphQL Admin API, Webhooks and Node.js for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Shopify App CLI setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Custom Apps?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Custom Apps?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Custom Apps work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Custom Apps?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Custom Apps?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify CRO process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify CRO work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify CRO?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify CRO?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify CRO?
We work with GA4, Microsoft Clarity, Shopify Analytics, Intelligems and Hotjar for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing GA4 setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify CRO?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify CRO?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify CRO work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify CRO?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify CRO?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Speed Optimization process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Speed Optimization work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Speed Optimization?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Speed Optimization?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Speed Optimization?
We work with Lighthouse, WebPageTest, Chrome DevTools, Shopify Theme Inspector and Cloudflare for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Lighthouse setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Speed Optimization?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Speed Optimization?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Speed Optimization work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Speed Optimization?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Speed Optimization?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify SEO process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify SEO work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify SEO?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify SEO?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify SEO?
We work with Google Search Console, Screaming Frog, Ahrefs, Shopify Liquid and Schema.org for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Google Search Console setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify SEO?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify SEO?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify SEO work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify SEO?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify SEO?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Store Setup process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Store Setup work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Store Setup?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Store Setup?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Store Setup?
We work with Shopify Admin, Shopify Payments, Shopify Shipping, Avalara and Matrixify for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Shopify Admin setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Store Setup?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Store Setup?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Store Setup work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Store Setup?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Store Setup?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Plus Development process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Plus Development work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Plus Development?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Plus Development?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Plus Development?
We work with Shopify Plus, Shopify Functions, Checkout UI extensions, Shopify Flow and Launchpad for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Shopify Plus setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Plus Development?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Plus Development?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Plus Development work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Plus Development?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Plus Development?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify POS Setup process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify POS Setup work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify POS Setup?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify POS Setup?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify POS Setup?
We work with Shopify POS, Shopify Locations, Stocky, Star / Zebra hardware and Shopify Admin API for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Shopify POS setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify POS Setup?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify POS Setup?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify POS Setup work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify POS Setup?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify POS Setup?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Markets Setup process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Markets Setup work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Markets Setup?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Markets Setup?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Markets Setup?
We work with Shopify Markets, Shopify Payments, Geolocation app, hreflang and Avalara for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Shopify Markets setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Markets Setup?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Markets Setup?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Markets Setup work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Markets Setup?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Markets Setup?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Functions Development process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Functions Development work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Functions Development?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Functions Development?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Functions Development?
We work with Shopify Functions, Rust / JavaScript, Shopify CLI, GraphQL Admin API and Vitest for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Shopify Functions setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Functions Development?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Functions Development?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Functions Development work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Functions Development?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Functions Development?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Flow Automation process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Flow Automation work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Flow Automation?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Flow Automation?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Flow Automation?
We work with Shopify Flow, Shopify Admin, Klaviyo, Slack and Google Sheets for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Shopify Flow setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Flow Automation?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Flow Automation?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Flow Automation work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Flow Automation?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Flow Automation?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Oxygen Deployment process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Oxygen Deployment work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
We work with Oxygen, Shopify CLI, GitHub Actions, Hydrogen and Cloudflare for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Oxygen setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Oxygen Deployment work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Private Apps process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Private Apps work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Private Apps?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Private Apps?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Private Apps?
We work with Admin API access tokens, Node.js, Webhooks, AWS Lambda and Postman for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Admin API access tokens setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Private Apps?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Private Apps?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Private Apps work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Private Apps?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Private Apps?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Public App Development process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Public App Development work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Public App Development?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Public App Development?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Public App Development?
We work with Shopify App CLI, Remix, Polaris, Billing API, GDPR webhooks and App Bridge for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
How do we get started with Shopify Public App Development?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Public App Development?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Public App Development work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Public App Development?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Public App Development?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Maintenance process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Maintenance work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Maintenance?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Maintenance?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Maintenance?
We work with Rewind, Shopify CLI, UptimeRobot, Git and Shopify Admin for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Rewind setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Maintenance?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Maintenance?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Maintenance work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Maintenance?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Maintenance?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Product Upload process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Product Upload work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Product Upload?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Product Upload?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Product Upload?
We work with Matrixify, Shopify Admin API, Google Sheets, ImageOptim and Metafields for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
How do we get started with Shopify Product Upload?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Product Upload?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Product Upload work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Product Upload?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Product Upload?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Store Management process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Store Management work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Store Management?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Store Management?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Store Management?
We work with Shopify Admin, Shopify Flow, Klaviyo, Google Sheets and Slack for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
How do we get started with Shopify Store Management?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Store Management?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Store Management work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Store Management?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Store Management?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify ERP Integration process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify ERP Integration work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify ERP Integration?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify ERP Integration?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify ERP Integration?
We work with NetSuite, SAP Business One, Dynamics 365 Business Central, Celigo and Shopify Admin API for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing NetSuite setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify ERP Integration?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify ERP Integration?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify ERP Integration work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify ERP Integration?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify ERP Integration?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify CRM Integration process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify CRM Integration work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify CRM Integration?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify CRM Integration?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify CRM Integration?
We work with HubSpot, Salesforce, Klaviyo, Shopify Webhooks and Segment for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing HubSpot setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify CRM Integration?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify CRM Integration?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify CRM Integration work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify CRM Integration?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify CRM Integration?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Wholesale process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Wholesale work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Wholesale?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Wholesale?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Wholesale?
We work with Shopify B2B, Catalogs API, Shopify Functions, Draft orders and Customer tags for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
How do we get started with Shopify Wholesale?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Wholesale?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Wholesale work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Wholesale?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Wholesale?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
How does the Shopify Subscription Setup process work?
Four stages, and none of them are a surprise. First a conversation about what you actually need. Then a written scope with a fixed price and a start date, sent before you commit to anything. Then the build, which you can see as it happens rather than being shown at the end. Then handover — documentation and everything you need to run it without us.
Who will actually do my Shopify Subscription Setup work?
The people who scoped it. There is no arrangement here where a senior person wins the work and a junior delivers it — you will know who is on your project and you will speak to them directly rather than through an account manager relaying messages.
How will we communicate during Shopify Subscription Setup?
WhatsApp or email for day-to-day, whichever you prefer, plus a written update at each milestone. We do not require you to attend a standing weekly call to receive information that fits in a message. If something is going wrong you hear it when we find out, not at the next scheduled meeting.
What do you need from us to start Shopify Subscription Setup?
Access to the relevant systems, one person on your side who can make decisions, and any content or assets the scope depends on. The most common cause of delay on this kind of work is not the build — it is waiting on approvals and material from the client side, so we agree who owns those before we begin.
Which platforms and tools do you use for Shopify Subscription Setup?
We work with Shopify Subscriptions API, Recharge, Skio, Shopify Payments and Klaviyo for this. If your stack differs we will tell you honestly whether we are the right team before you commit — we would rather turn work down than learn a platform on your budget.
Can you work with our existing Shopify Subscriptions API setup?
Usually yes, and we prefer to. Rebuilding something that works is a cost with no return. We review what you have first and tell you plainly which parts are worth keeping, which need repair, and which are cheaper to replace than to maintain — including when the honest answer is that nothing needs to change.
How do we get started with Shopify Subscription Setup?
Message us with what you need. One paragraph is plenty. You'll hear back within a business day, either with a written scope and a fixed price, or with a couple of questions if something important is missing. There's no form to fill in before you get to speak to a person.
Can you work alongside our existing agency or developer on Shopify Subscription Setup?
Regularly, and it usually goes fine. What makes it work is a clear split of who owns what, written down before anyone starts. What makes it fail is two suppliers with overlapping scope and no agreed boundary, which turns into a blame conversation the first time something breaks.
Can you take over Shopify Subscription Setup work someone else started?
Often yes. We will review what exists and tell you plainly whether it is worth continuing or cheaper to redo — and we will say "continue" when that is true, even though a rebuild is the larger invoice. What we will not do is quote a rescue without looking at the state of it first.
Will you train our team on Shopify Subscription Setup?
A walkthrough at handover is included, and the documentation is written for a person who was not in the build. If you want structured training beyond that — several sessions, multiple people, recorded material — say so during scoping and it goes in as a line item rather than being assumed either way.
Who do we contact if something goes wrong during Shopify Subscription Setup?
The person doing the work, directly. There is no account manager relaying messages, and no ticket queue between you and the answer. If it is urgent, WhatsApp reaches someone faster than email during either office's working day.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Theme Development?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Theme Development affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Theme Development affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Theme Development on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Theme Customization?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Theme Customization affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Theme Customization affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Theme Customization on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Store Migration?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Store Migration affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Store Migration affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Store Migration on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify B2B?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify B2B affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify B2B affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify B2B on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Checkout Extensibility affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Checkout Extensibility affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Checkout Extensibility on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Hydrogen Development?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Hydrogen Development affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Hydrogen Development affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Hydrogen Development on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Custom Apps?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Custom Apps affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Custom Apps affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Custom Apps on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify CRO?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify CRO affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify CRO affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify CRO on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Speed Optimization?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Speed Optimization affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Speed Optimization affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Speed Optimization on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify SEO?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify SEO affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify SEO affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify SEO on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Store Setup?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Store Setup affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Store Setup affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Store Setup on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Plus Development?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Plus Development affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Plus Development affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Plus Development on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify POS Setup?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify POS Setup affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify POS Setup affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify POS Setup on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Markets Setup?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Markets Setup affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Markets Setup affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Markets Setup on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Functions Development?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Functions Development affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Functions Development affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Functions Development on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Flow Automation?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Flow Automation affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Flow Automation affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Flow Automation on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Oxygen Deployment affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Oxygen Deployment affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Oxygen Deployment on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Private Apps?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Private Apps affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Private Apps affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Private Apps on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Public App Development?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Public App Development affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Public App Development affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Public App Development on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Maintenance?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Maintenance affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Maintenance affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Maintenance on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Product Upload?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Product Upload affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Product Upload affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Product Upload on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Store Management?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Store Management affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Store Management affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Store Management on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify ERP Integration?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify ERP Integration affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify ERP Integration affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify ERP Integration on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify CRM Integration?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify CRM Integration affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify CRM Integration affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify CRM Integration on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Wholesale?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Wholesale affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Wholesale affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Wholesale on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Is accessibility part of Shopify Subscription Setup?
The basics are, and they are not optional extras: keyboard navigation, sensible labelling, and colour contrast that a person can actually read. A full WCAG audit and remediation is a bigger piece of work with its own scope — we will tell you which you need rather than quietly implying the basics are the same thing.
Will Shopify Subscription Setup affect our site speed?
We check. Anything we add is measured on a real mid-range phone before and after, because that is the device most of your traffic is on and it is where slowness actually shows. If a requested feature would cost real performance, you get told the trade-off and you decide — rather than discovering it in a report later.
Will Shopify Subscription Setup affect our search rankings?
Where the work touches URLs, content or page structure, yes — and we plan for it. Redirects mapped, structure preserved, nothing silently dropped. Where it does not touch those things, it will not, and we will not claim it as an SEO benefit to make the quote look better.
Do you test Shopify Subscription Setup on mobile?
On real devices, not just a resized desktop browser. The two are not the same: touch targets, keyboard behaviour on forms, and how it performs on a mid-range Android are all things a resized window will happily lie about.
Who owns the work after Shopify Theme Development is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Theme Development is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
What if something breaks after handover?
If it is a defect in what we built, we fix it — that is not a support contract, it is finishing the job properly. If it breaks because something else changed, a platform update or a third-party service, we will tell you what happened and what it would take to resolve, and you decide.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Theme Development?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Theme Development?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Theme Customization is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Theme Customization is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Theme Customization?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Theme Customization?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Store Migration is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Store Migration is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Store Migration?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Store Migration?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify B2B is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify B2B is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify B2B?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify B2B?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Checkout Extensibility is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Checkout Extensibility is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Hydrogen Development is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Hydrogen Development is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Hydrogen Development?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Hydrogen Development?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Custom Apps is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Custom Apps is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Custom Apps?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Custom Apps?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify CRO is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify CRO is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify CRO?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify CRO?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Speed Optimization is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Speed Optimization is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Speed Optimization?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Speed Optimization?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify SEO is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify SEO is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify SEO?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify SEO?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Store Setup is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Store Setup is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Store Setup?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Store Setup?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Plus Development is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Plus Development is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Plus Development?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Plus Development?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify POS Setup is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify POS Setup is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify POS Setup?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify POS Setup?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Markets Setup is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Markets Setup is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Markets Setup?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Markets Setup?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Functions Development is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Functions Development is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Functions Development?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Functions Development?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Flow Automation is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Flow Automation is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Flow Automation?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Flow Automation?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Oxygen Deployment is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Oxygen Deployment is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Private Apps is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Private Apps is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Private Apps?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Private Apps?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Public App Development is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Public App Development is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Public App Development?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Public App Development?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Maintenance is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Maintenance is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Maintenance?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Maintenance?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Product Upload is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Product Upload is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Product Upload?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Product Upload?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Store Management is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Store Management is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Store Management?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Store Management?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify ERP Integration is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify ERP Integration is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify ERP Integration?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify ERP Integration?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify CRM Integration is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify CRM Integration is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify CRM Integration?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify CRM Integration?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Wholesale is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Wholesale is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Wholesale?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Wholesale?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Who owns the work after Shopify Subscription Setup is finished?
You do, outright, on final payment. Code, files, accounts, assets. Nothing sits on our infrastructure holding you in place and no licence quietly reverts to us. If you move to someone else next year, everything you need goes with you.
What happens after Shopify Subscription Setup is delivered?
You get a handover: the work itself, documentation of how it is put together, and access to everything involved. We stay available for questions afterwards. There is no automatic rollover into a monthly fee — if you want ongoing support you ask for it, rather than having to cancel something you never chose.
Can we make changes ourselves after Shopify Subscription Setup?
That is the intention. The handover exists so your team is not dependent on us for routine changes. Where the work involves something your team genuinely cannot maintain, we say so during scoping rather than presenting it as a feature after the fact.
Do you provide reporting after Shopify Subscription Setup?
You get the before-and-after on whatever measure was agreed at the start, using the same method both times. Ongoing monthly reporting is a separate arrangement — a recurring report is a recurring cost, and it should be something you chose rather than something that appeared.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Theme Development?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Theme Development worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Do you work with businesses outside the UK and Pakistan?
Yes. This work is delivered remotely and we work with clients across time zones. We have offices in both countries, which in practice means a wide window of overlap with most of Europe, the Middle East and North America. Where a project needs live hours, we agree them up front.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Theme Customization?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Theme Customization worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Store Migration?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Store Migration worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify B2B?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify B2B worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Checkout Extensibility?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Checkout Extensibility worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Hydrogen Development?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Hydrogen Development worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Custom Apps?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Custom Apps worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify CRO?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify CRO worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Speed Optimization?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Speed Optimization worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify SEO?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify SEO worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Store Setup?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Store Setup worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Plus Development?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Plus Development worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify POS Setup?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify POS Setup worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Markets Setup?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Markets Setup worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Functions Development?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Functions Development worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Flow Automation?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Flow Automation worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Oxygen Deployment?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Oxygen Deployment worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Private Apps?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Private Apps worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Public App Development?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Public App Development worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Maintenance?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Maintenance worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Product Upload?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Product Upload worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Store Management?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Store Management worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify ERP Integration?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify ERP Integration worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify CRM Integration?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify CRM Integration worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Wholesale?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Wholesale worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Can you guarantee results from Shopify Subscription Setup?
We'll guarantee the scope, the date and the quality of the work, because those are ours to control and they're written down. We won't guarantee an outcome that depends on your market, your competitors and platforms none of us own. Anyone promising you a specific number there is either guessing or selling.
How do we know Shopify Subscription Setup worked?
We agree what success looks like before starting, and it has to be something measurable rather than a feeling. Whichever measure applies to your situation, you get the before figure as well as the after — reporting a result without a baseline is not evidence of anything.
Do I need Shopify Plus?
Usually not. Plus earns its cost when you need checkout extensibility at scale, B2B company accounts, more than three staff-heavy stores, or Shopify Functions with high order volume. Below roughly $1.5m a year in revenue, the standard plan plus good engineering almost always wins on total cost.
Can you customise the Shopify checkout?
Yes, through checkout extensibility — UI extensions, Functions for discounts, shipping and payment rules, and branding through the checkout editor. We do not touch checkout.liquid, which Shopify has deprecated. Anything not achievable in the supported model, we tell you upfront rather than building something that breaks at the next update.
Will a custom theme slow my store down?
A custom theme built properly is faster than a bought theme, because bought themes carry settings and sections you never use. The bigger performance problem is nearly always apps injecting scripts. We audit that first and usually cut load time more by removing apps than by rewriting Liquid.
Do you build public apps or private ones?
Both. Custom apps for a single store are quicker and need no review. Public apps for the Shopify App Store need Built for Shopify compliance, billing, GDPR webhooks and a review cycle that takes weeks. We are honest about which one your idea actually needs.
Could my own team do Shopify Theme Development instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Theme Customization instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Store Migration instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify B2B instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Checkout Extensibility instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Hydrogen Development instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Custom Apps instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify CRO instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Speed Optimization instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify SEO instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Store Setup instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Plus Development instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify POS Setup instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Markets Setup instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Functions Development instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Flow Automation instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Oxygen Deployment instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Private Apps instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Public App Development instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Maintenance instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Product Upload instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Store Management instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify ERP Integration instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify CRM Integration instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Wholesale instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Could my own team do Shopify Subscription Setup instead?
Often, yes — and if we think so, we'll tell you. Bringing us in makes sense when your team hasn't done this particular thing before, when it's a one-off that doesn't justify a hire, or when time rather than skill is what you're short of. If it's that last one, be clear with yourself that you're buying time back, not expertise you don't have.
Not the question you had? Send it to us on WhatsApp or email it. We answer in writing — no call required, and no obligation.